Home-Dzine IDEAS AND INSPIRATION FOR YOUR HOME August 2013 online Craft • DIY • Food • Green • Home Decor & Design
Mar 23, 2016
Home-DzineIDEAS AND INSPIRATION FOR YOUR HOME
August 2013
online
Craft bull DIY bull Food bull Green bull Home Decor amp Design
2
Home-Dzine Online is written and compiled by Janice Anderssen All projects in this issue remain the property of Home-Dzine and Janice Anderssen or the respective copyright holders and may not be copied or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission
With spring just around the corner this issue looks at rooms in the home and do-able DIY projects you can tackle to give your home a new look - without spending a fortune Having made most of my own furniture I love the dining tables featured this month and will definitely be making one of myown how about you
Grab your tools and some paint and get crafty - and donrsquot forget to send me some pics of your finished projects
Janice
a word or two
5 DINING TABLEGorgeous tables you can make
31 ON THE CHEAPFurniture manufacture
14 COLOURFUL KITCHENColour combo
16 INSPIRINGBEDROOMSCreate the illusionof space and opulence
24 TIPS ON MAKINGBEDROOM FURNITURE
3
32 DIY STORAGE BEDMake your own bed
41 CREATIVE IDEAS WITHTRELLIS amp LATTICE
45 DIYCONCRETE EDGING
47 FINALLYA lawnmower that makes life easier
49 FOR THEGUYSMake anoutdoorcooler box
4
VivaLuxcoza
5
inspiring design
This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse
Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started
6
Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table
affordableDINING TABLE
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
2
Home-Dzine Online is written and compiled by Janice Anderssen All projects in this issue remain the property of Home-Dzine and Janice Anderssen or the respective copyright holders and may not be copied or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission
With spring just around the corner this issue looks at rooms in the home and do-able DIY projects you can tackle to give your home a new look - without spending a fortune Having made most of my own furniture I love the dining tables featured this month and will definitely be making one of myown how about you
Grab your tools and some paint and get crafty - and donrsquot forget to send me some pics of your finished projects
Janice
a word or two
5 DINING TABLEGorgeous tables you can make
31 ON THE CHEAPFurniture manufacture
14 COLOURFUL KITCHENColour combo
16 INSPIRINGBEDROOMSCreate the illusionof space and opulence
24 TIPS ON MAKINGBEDROOM FURNITURE
3
32 DIY STORAGE BEDMake your own bed
41 CREATIVE IDEAS WITHTRELLIS amp LATTICE
45 DIYCONCRETE EDGING
47 FINALLYA lawnmower that makes life easier
49 FOR THEGUYSMake anoutdoorcooler box
4
VivaLuxcoza
5
inspiring design
This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse
Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started
6
Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table
affordableDINING TABLE
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
3
32 DIY STORAGE BEDMake your own bed
41 CREATIVE IDEAS WITHTRELLIS amp LATTICE
45 DIYCONCRETE EDGING
47 FINALLYA lawnmower that makes life easier
49 FOR THEGUYSMake anoutdoorcooler box
4
VivaLuxcoza
5
inspiring design
This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse
Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started
6
Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table
affordableDINING TABLE
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
4
VivaLuxcoza
5
inspiring design
This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse
Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started
6
Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table
affordableDINING TABLE
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
5
inspiring design
This month I am motivated to show you beautiful rooms that can be achieved with a few basic power tools and supplies from your local Builders Warehouse
Whether you are looking to refresh a room for the arrival of spring or to make furniture for your home on the following pages you will find plenty of ideas to get you started
6
Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table
affordableDINING TABLE
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
6
Making your own dining room table can easily save you thousands of Rand not to mention that you can make this table to fit into your dining room - nomatter what the size Once you have made the table making the benches is a breeze and you will soon be sitting down at your very own DIY dining table
affordableDINING TABLE
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
7
BUY EVERYTHING YOU NEED FOR THIS PROJECT AT YOUR LOCAL BUILDERS WAREHOUSE
To make a pine dining table you will find aselection of PAR pine at your local Builders
Warehouse Select the best pieces preferably straight pieces without knots
or missing chunks which will spoil the finished project
For this dining table that is 1500mm long x 900mm wide and 800mm high you will need
4 x 100 x 100mm pine cut to 780mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 1260mm2 x 77mm pine cut to 660mm6 x 150mm pine cut to 1500mm3 x 150mm pine cut to 820mm
Adjust the height for a lowerhigher tableAdjust the length of the table
Join sections together using Pockethole Jig dowels or Biscuit Joiner Or use steel angle brackets
TOOLSJigsaw and clean-cut bladesOrbital Sander + 120240-grit sanding padsDrillDriver and assorted bits
DIY TIPSand all the
pieces before you
assemble
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
8
1 Assemble the top
Place the planks side by side best side down and without any gaps between the planks on a flat levelsurface
Position the cross-supports on top leaving a 40mm gap on both ends and secure these with 35 x 30mm wood screws
2 Assemble the base
Join the front back and side aprons to the legs
For this you can use a Kreg Jig dowels biscuits and biscuit joiner or steel angle brackets
The front of each apron is flush with the front edge of each leg
3 Attach base to top
Position the frame on top of the table leaving a gap of 20mm around all sides
The easiest way to attach the base to the top is with angle brackets Use 2 brackets on the short sides and 3 brackets on the front and back Attach the brackets to the aprons and underside of the top
150
900
820 1500
40
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
9
4 Add support
To ensure stability and strength add corner braces cut from pine offcuts for each corner
Use steel angle brackets to attach to the legs and side aprons
GOOD TO KNOW
If you donrsquot own a Pockethole Jig or a Biscuit Joiner and find dowels abit fiddly using steel corner bracesis a simple way to join and secure sections of timber and board
5 Finishing
Itrsquos always a good idea to sand individual sections before you assemble Use an orbital or random orbit sander and 120-grit sanding pads to remove any roughness and then sand with 240-grit sanding pads for a smooth finish
Once assembled I like to sand again with 400-grit sandpaper for a silky-smooth finish that is especiallyimportant for a dining table
Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish is a polyurethane varnish that is ideal for a dining table that is used on a daily basis and needs protection from occasional spills The product is available in a satin or gloss finish
If you want to add a stain to the table do this before applying Plascon Woodcare Ultra Varnish
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
10
This kitchen dining table is constructed in the same way as the table shown on the previous pages The only difference is the shortened length and addition of cross-pieces on the legs to allow for a shelf storage area
Instead of an open timber top the table top can be clad with aluminium or brushed stainless steel sheeting 05mm thick
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
11
If you are able to get your hands on reclaimed timber this trestle-style dining table is made from old pine shipping pallets You can still see the knots and natural imperfections that make this table and matching bench one of a kind
Buy online at West Elm
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
12
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
13
This trestle-styledining table is madeby laminating (gluing)sections together tocreate the blocks for the table top and supports
Glue is applied to the timberand it is tightly clamped untilthe glue has dried
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
14
Todayrsquos modern kitchens are anything but dreary and bland These are kitchens you want to spend time in they are living spaces where the family can gather together to catch up on the dayrsquos events and happenings
Whether you want to install a brand new kitchen or give your old kitchen a makeover there are a few tips to keep in mind when planning your dream kitchen
bull Consider a layout that not only works well but that also improves the ways that family and friends can interact
bull Todayrsquos kitchens are open-plan onto adjoining dining and living spaces
bull Plan the space to have plenty of natural light and perhaps access to outdoor entertainment areas Replacing wall cabinetry with shelving or windows creates open kitchen space
bull Eat in kitchens that incorporate a countertop for casual or informal dining allow family and friends to sit and chat with the home chef without intruding on the space Itrsquos also a great place for the kids to sit and do their homework
http
www
loop
-dne
tdan
delio
nhtm
l
Add colour to your kitchen with painted walls and cabinetry
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
15
bull Walk-in pantries are popular for storing groceries and allowing easier access
bull Look at replacing old appliances with modern energy efficient models Stainless steel remains the popular choice and manufacturers are providing more flush-mount options
bull Be more aware of the materials used in a kitchen installation for renovation Choosing locally sourced recycled materials and reclaimed items has a profound impact on the overall ecological footprint of your home
bull Incorporate colour to update a kitchen to a trendy space Donrsquot be afraid to try bold colours
At the end of the day you want to design a kitchen that works for your family and your lifestyle
Careful planning and yoursquoll soon be on your way to transforming your dream kitchen into a reality
Donrsquot be afraid to experiment with bold colours
modern kitchens
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
16
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
17
inspiring bedrooms
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
18
Transforming your small bedroom into something more comforting and grand does not require special feats of magic
It will however require the use of large mirrors subtle lighting and a few pieces of nearly invisible furniture And you can expand the appeal of your bedroom even further with a few new tricks and some very simple ideas that cause small rooms to appear larger than they are
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
19
Add colourAlthough dark colours tend to make a room appear smaller by combining dark and light colour combinations and a couple of bedside cabinets with a reflective finish youcan create the optical illusion of a larger space by making the background recede
bull Shades of purple are consider colours of royalty and are used frequently in rooms to add a sense of opulence and richness In this room walls are painted with Plascon Double Velvet in Woodvine [R1-E1-2] The velvet sheen finish reflect just the right amount of light
bull On the ceiling Plascon Polvin tinted in Spiced Cognac [01-E2-2] adds a level of warmth and depth to the room increasing the level of comfort
bull For contrast and accent window trim skirtings and cornice are painted in a crisp white This is another example of how to up the light when decorating with darker colours
If yoursquore not a fan of purple consider a deep blue - Dusk of Day [B6-E1-2] deep red - Chestnut Filly [R4-D1-1] or green - Deep Dragon [G2-E1-1]
sour
ce h
ome d
epot
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
20
Create a focal point
For sheer impact adding a dramatic headboard - or in this case a curtained canopy - instantly attracts attention and increases lsquowowrsquo factor
bull Build a box (sides and front panels) using 18mm SupaWood glued and screwed together Mount this onto the wall with steel angle brackets wall plugs and screws and then top off with crown moulding
bull Fit a curtain rod inside the box If you mount the rod on half-brackets this will be easier to remove when you need to take the curtain down for cleaning
bull Shop for fabrics that have a luxurious look You donrsquot need to spend a fortune if you shop for synthetic fabrics but do buy something practical that can be easily cleaned and will not fade Be on the lookout for fabrics that have a shimmering effect and reflect light
bull Striped patterns would work well in this setting by creating the impression of height and further accentuating the bed as a focal point
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
21
Increase the magic
Never underestimate the power of lighting and mirrors As an illusionist uses these as part of the show you can use light and mirrors to your advantage in a small bedroom
bull Splurge on a gorgeous chandelier and a pair of elegant bedside lamps Even if you scrimp on everything else the lighting should be dramatic and glamorous
bull Buying cut mirrors and making your own frames will save you a bundle on buying a ready-made framed mirror You will find instructions onHome-Dzine for simple ways to frame a mirror Adding mirrors above the bedside tables instantly creates the illusion of a larger space
bull Paint bedside cabinets with Plascon Metallic Gold Paint or with Rust-Oleum Pure Gold metallic spray paint The reflective finish adds to the illusion Find detailedinstructions on how-to on Home-Dzine
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
22
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
23
Accessorize
Now itrsquos time to up the glam factor by adding accessories
bull Gilded frames in silver and gold complement the existing finish on thebedside cabinets and fabrics With inexpensive moulding and trim and by having your glass cut to size at your local Builders Warehouse you donrsquot have to spend a fortune for framed art
bull Shop around for affordable decor accessories If you canrsquot find what youare looking for to match the room grab a can of Rust-Oleum Pure Gold or Titanium Silver spray paint and create your own
How easy was that Just goes to show that you can have an opulent bedroom - no matter what the size and on a limited budget
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
24
Get creative - make your own bedroom furniture
On the following pages we show you how to make a storage bed but with a few basic power tools you can make all the furniture for your bedroom And it will cost a fraction of what is costs to buy furniture in the store
When making your own bedroom furniture and accessories a visit to your local Builders Warehouse store will provide you with everything you need to complete the project
Timber amp Board
In the timber section you will find laminatedpine shelving and PAR pine planks in 18 and 24 metre lengths and ranging in width from 300 to 600mm
Laminated pine shelving is made by joining together strips of pine to manufacture wider panels
Select pieces that are not bowed or warped and avoid any that have knots or visible joins
You can use laminated pine shelving for bookcases shelves and furniture that is to be stained and sealedvarnished rather than painted
TIPS FOR MAKING YOUR OWN FURNITURE
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
25
PG Bison SupaWood
Itrsquos important when buying SupaWood that you ensure itrsquos PG Bison SupaWood There is a BIG difference between cheap imported MDF and locally produced SupaWood
- PG Bison SupaWood is compressed un-der greater pressure to produce a strong-er board
- Some inferior products have a lsquoskinrsquo or layer on top that is difficult to sandsmooth
- Cheaper products show visible fibres onthe surface of the board and these swell when painted - spoiling the finish
If yoursquore not sure what type of board you are buying ask the salesperson to confirm
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
For furniturethat is to bepainted SupaWoodprovides a smoothfinish for a professionalproject
To reduce absorbency on the cut edges polish with 240-grit sandpaper or rub a thin layer of wood filler over the edge andsand smooth before painting
You can use acrylic or oil-based paints on SupaWood
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
26
PINE
SUPAWOOD
OSB
BISONBORD
PLYWOOD
BisonBord
BisonBord - or particle board - is not the same as chipboard Used more for commercial applications chipboard has the texture of Weetbix - and be just as crumbly
BisonBord on the other hand is far more compressed and less likely to fall apart This is of particular importance is you are using BisonBord as the foundation or frame for a project An inferior product will eventually fall apart at the seams
Use BisonBord for projects that will be covered or upholstered such as headboards and ottomans since the product shouldnrsquot be stained or painted and is not intended for visible finishing
OSB - Oriented Strand Board
OSB is similar to BisonBord - or particle board - but is manufactured using strands that are woven in layers to create a far stronger product - at the same price
Plywood
There are various types of plywood both for interior and exterior applications
Shutterply is commercial-grade plywood that is very affordable but not nicely finished so itrsquos also ideal for non-visible components
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
27
Pine or birch plywood
These plywoods are faced with a thin pine or birch veneer that makes them a very affordable option when compared to buying timber of the same species
The only downside with veneer is that special care has to be taken when sanding so as not to sand away this 3mm veneer layer
Pine or birch plywood can be use in manufacture as a visible component as it can be oiled waxed stained sealed or varnished
Pine or birch plywood is also used extensively inthe manufacture of sustainable furniture due to the fact that it is manufactured from recycled timber fibres
ecofriendlychoice
MelaWood
Donrsquot overlook the possibilities to use MelaWood for furniture projects
Using either BisonBord or SupaWood as a substrate a single sheet of melamine-impregnated decor paper is bonded to the board surfaces to provides a durable scratch and moisture resistant surface
MelaWood is suitable for medium duty vertical applications such as door and drawer frontals carcassing furniture components and shelving as well as wall cladding MelaWood is also the ideal choice for kitchen and built-in cupboards
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
28
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
29
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
30
While every effort is made to offer alternatives to timber there are still a few species of timber that are sustainable - if harvested responsibly But keep in mind that any timber species is going to be expensive
Heritage furniture wouldnrsquot be worth handing down to future generations if it wasnrsquot made of wood There is absolutely nothing to beat the natural beauty of furniture made with genuine woods But unfortunately wood is not always an option when you are working on a limited budget so it pays to look at what hardwoods are available that wonrsquot cost the earth
Probably the most affordable of woods to buy are pine meranti and saligna Pine being the softest of the three is also the cheapest However pine is not always the best wood to work with due to its softness For tables and surfaces that need to be able to take everyday living meranti or saligna are harder
Other reasonably priced hardwoods to consider for projects are
- Cedar- Kiaat- Poplar
You will find most of these hardwoods at timber merchants and suppliers
MAKING WOODFURNITURE THATLASTS
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
31
Wersquove all seen modern furniture advertised in the local newspaper - the ones advertised at a low low price that leaves you wondering what the catch is And believe me there will be a catch
It may look fantastic but what is the quality like on these pieces How are retailers able sell at such a low price Perhaps this article will inform and educate you on what to look out for to ensure you get the most for your hard earned money and what questions to ask the sales staff
One major difference between higherpriced furniture and the cheaper (bargain) alternative - the material it is made from Mass produced furniture is generally made from chipboard Itrsquos a cheap board product that is relatively light- weight and thus a popular choice for budget furniture
While many manufacturers wrap chipboard in a paper-based coating itrsquos still chipboard Common problems associated with cheaply made chipboard furniture are the connecting
joints used to fit andassemble the f u r n i t u r e Due to the lower density of chipboard items such as screws can easily strip
out the screw hole and in some cases can rip out if put under enough pressure
These are the sacrifices one makes whenpurchasing this low quality chipboard furniture
Given the choice Supawood offers a numberof advantages over chipboard Whilst a little more expensive it is still much cheaper than wood which makes it a popular choice for furniture Due to its higher density SupaWood is far stronger than chipboard of the same thickness screws and joints also fix moresecurely SupaWood is also smooth because the wood fibres used are fine and uniformThis allows easier application of primer andpaint as it applies easily to the smooth surface producing an attractive finish
http
www
inee
dfurn
iture
coza
CHEAP amp NASTY
Cheap furniture
comes at a price
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
32
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
33
diy project - storage bed
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
34
609mm
609mm
1900mm 500mm
300mm
BACK SIDE OF FRAME
20 x 44 x 1900
Make two drawer box frames
1 Drill through the top and bottom to attach two side sections The sections should be flush at the back
2 Measure in 621mm from both sides and use this as a mark to place and mount the two upright dividers
3 Attach the back beams onto the back of the drawer box frame The top beam should be mounted in line with the bottom of the top section
MOUNT FLUSH WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF TOP
SECTION
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
35
4 Use pocketholes dowels biscuits or steel braces underneath to attach the 20 x 44 x 1900mm PAR pine to the front - underneath the sides and upright dividers
5 Repeat step 4 for the top edge
6 Use panel pins and wood glue to add the faces onto the front of the side and upright dividers
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
36
7 Turn the drawer frame upside down to attach 2 of 44 x 44 x 1900mm base supports
Make the drawers
1 Screw the base to the sides and then insert and attach the back to make the frame
2 Measure up 150mm on both sides and at this mark attach a drawer slider support
NOTE Because drawer sliders are not all the same some adjustment will be required here to ensure the drawer fits
3 Make up the drawer front to fitinto the opening Allow a 2mm gap all around
Screw the drawer front onto the framer and then glue a frame around the front using 6mm PG Bison SupaWood 6mm thick x 50mm wide
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
37
For added detail you can glue moulding or trim on the inside edge of the frame
Finally add you choice of handle or knob
These two drawer boxes form the base of the bed and you can adjust the width by widening or shortening the space between the two drawer boxes In this way you can design a double queen or king-size bed
For a single or three-quarter bed you will need to reduce the width of the boxes to fit
Mount 44 x 44mm PAR pine cross-beams between the two drawer boxes to allow fitting of a board to bridge the gap betweenthe drawer boxes
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
38
Both the headboard and footboard are made separately and then attached to the drawer boxes
You can make these as simple or as decorative as you wish You will find a selection of PARpine moulding and trim at your local Builders Warehouse
Design the headboard and footboard to your personal style and build up layers of timber board and trim
Decorative feet - at the same height as the base supports - are added to finish off
Use wood filler to fill in any gaps or holes and leave this to dry
Take the time to sand all the sections properly starting with 120-grit and an orbital sander to sand the entire assembly and finishing with 240-grit for a smooth finish Wipeclean with a cloth lightly dampened with mineral turpentine to remove all dust
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
http
doity
ourse
lfdiva
sblog
spot
com
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
39
Finishing
For all furniture projects I prefer to use a Bosch Spray System The PFS 65 is very easy to use and easy to clean after use
You can use the PFS system with any type of paint but water-based paints dry quickly and you donrsquot have to spend as much time cleaning up afterwards
Choose a paint that is washable such as Plascon Double Velvet
When mixing the paint for spraying a ratio of 80 paint and 20 water in the paint pot is perfect Apply a light first coat and allow to dry before applying additional coats
If you prefer a matt finish or want to apply antique wax tothe painted finish paint with Plascon Polvin Mix in exactlythe same way
If you donrsquot have a Bosch spray system you can use a paintbrush for detailed areas and a foam roller for flat surfaces
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
40
infocountryhomedesigncoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
41
fresh design
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
42
We know that trellis panels are a great way to add affordableaccents to outdoors but who says you canrsquot use trellis indoors as well
There are so many waysto use trellis or lattice panels to add interest architectural detail and privacy to almost any room in the home
LEFT Rather than close off this room lattice panelshave been framed to create a decorative opening
BELOW Use lattice panels to add cottage detail to a plain kitchen
BELOW Furniture design is yet another way to incorporate trellis-work
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
43
Trellis is an easy way to add privacy to a garden room or patio If you make your own trellis it becomes far cheaper than buying ready-made trellis panels
TOP Screen off a patio with large trellispanels to keep nosey neighbours out of sight
RIGHT Add decorative detail to a porch or garden room with trellis panels that help shade out bright sunlight
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
44
This past weekend was spent on transforming a pavement into a green paradise that is proving the be the envy of neighbours
Laying DuraTurf on the front pavement has turned what was a drab area into a wonderful eye-catching space that has plenty of curb appeal
More on this in next monthrsquos issue of Home-Dzine Online
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
45
Adding a concrete edging to your garden beds is an inexpensive way to keep lawn edges neat and beds and borders tidy Set aside a day and pop into your local Builders Warehouse to buy everything you need for this projectConcrete edging is both decorative and functional and if you follow the steps on the following pages your edging will last for years and years
Concrete garden edging effectively defines garden beds tree surroundsand driveway curbs their versatility enabling you to match any landscape contour
The amount of cement required for this project will vary depending on the size of the area you want to fill but one bagwill do plenty
YOU WILL NEED
- Saw for cutting board- Hammer- 3mm Hardboard- Wood stakes- Wood screws- DrillDriver with screw bit- Wood float amp margin trowel- Spade- Edging tool- Mixing tub- Cement and sand- Concrete sealer- Bucket
glorious gardening
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
46
STEP 1Lay out the perimeter of your edging with a garden hose For best results devise a design in which the border is at least 20cm wide
STEP 2Dig out your planned border perimeter to a 10cm depth and 20cm width
Compact the soil to create a solid base for the concrete you will add in a later step
STEP 3Drive in wood stakes at 50cm intervals along the border
STEP 4With wood screws attach pieces of flexible hardboard(for curved borders) or rigid plywood (for angular installations) to the wood stakes
STEP 5For spacers cut blocks equal to the width of the border Set your spacers as needed along the bottom of the excavated area to maintain a consistent garden border width
STEP 6Mix cement and sand to a firm workableconsistency and pour it into the border form using a margin trowel to spread and consolidate the mix
STEP 7Wait for the bleed water to disappear to smooth the surface with a wood float Use atrowel to cut control joints at one metre intervals each one at least 2cm deep Smooth the edges with a concrete edging tool
STEP 8Apply concrete sealer to the concrete before letting it cure for 3 - 5 days Once cured remove the forms and backfill againstthe lawn border with soil
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
47
FINALLY A lawnmower that does all the hard work for you
Plus if you donrsquot mow the lawn religiously every weekend you end up struggling to cut thick lawn pushing and pulling to unclog the grass buildup and trying to get a neat professional-looking lawn
Now imagine a lawnmower that cuts right up to the edge that is fitted with a motor thatcuts grass up to 30cm in height effortlessly and that is considerably lighter than comparable lawnmowers The Bosch Rotak Lawnmover offers all this and more
Cutting the lawn can be a schlepp Firstly you have to dig the mower out of the hut or storage shed every weekend Then you have to lug it to the lawn - not an easy task in my garden where my hut is around the side of the house
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
48
Portability and power are important in a lawnmower even for a small garden
I love gardening and donrsquot mind working up the occasional sweat on a hot summerrsquos day but cutting the lawn is not everyonersquos favourite chore so why not make it easier
The Bosch Rotak Lawnmower features a design that lets you cut right up to the edge - no need to cut or use a weedeater for neat edges
The unit is fitted with handlesfor easy transport and is lightweight and easy to carry
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
49
diy project - outdoor cooler boxhtt
pw
wwbi
rdsa
ndso
apco
m20
1306
coole
r-stan
d-diy
-tutor
ial-fa
thers-
dayh
tml
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
50
YOU WILL NEED
Note This plan is designed to fit aColeman 45 litre cooler box (651cm x 3589cm x 3589cm) You will need to measure the exterior dimensions of your cooler box and make modifications whererequired
GOOD TO KNOWMeasuring your cooler box can be tricky with all of the rounded corners and sloped edges Measure at its largest diameter that is usually around the top rim To get an accurate height measurement level your tape from the ground and go up from there
- Cooler box- 2 Hinges- 4 Caster wheels (optional)- 6 and 12mm pockethole screws- Wood glue- Wood fillerTOOLS- Tape measure and pencil- Carpenterrsquos square- Kreg Jig- DrillDriver plus assorted bits- Countersink bit- Mitre saw- Orbital sander- Spirit level
FRAMEA 4 - 50 x 50 x 900mm - legsB 6 - 50 x 50 x 610mm - crossbeamC 2 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - sidesD 12 - 50 x 100mm 340mm - shelf slats5 - 20 x 77 x 270mm - back panel4 - 20 x 150 x 270mm - frontback panel2 - 50 x 59 x 270mm - front panel4 - 20 x 150 220mm - Side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 220mm - side panels2 - 20 x 77 x 710mm - ends mitred at 45o
2 - 20 x 77 x 445mm - ends mitred at 45o
Scrap plywood 270 x 250mm
LID2 - 20 x 77mm x 690mm - 45o for top frame2 - 20 x 77 x 406mm - 45o for top frame4 - 20 x 150 x 370 - top panel1 - 20 x 77 x 370mm - top panel2 - 1x2 13rdquo (inner frame)2 - 1x2 25 12rdquo (inner frame)
A
B
DIY TIPHave all your timber cut to
size
C
D
D
C
A
Pre-drill and countersink all holes before attaching with screws and use wood glue on all joins for a stronger hold Wipe excess glue off bare wood for stained projects to prevent inconsistency on the finish
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
51
Preparing your cooler
You want to get the tightest fit possible inthe stand This requires a little disassembly and some cosmetic work First remove the lid from the cooler and get rid of the hinges
Next came removing the handles and the cap on the cooler drain Any stubs or bits still sticking out can be cut off with a junior hacksaw
1 Sand and prime all the piecesItrsquos always a good idea to sand pieces before assembly Start with 120-grit and smooth with 240-grit
If you are applying stain or paint you can also do this before assembly - leaving the final coat until the end
2 Assemble front and back framesThe legs are 900mm high and are attached to the crossbeams [B] with pocketholes
Measure up 150mm and 540mm from the bottom and mark to mount the crossbeams
3 Attach the side panels Using pocketholes attach the side panels C] to the top of the legs
Note Only attach the side panels to one frame at this stage to make it easier to fit theshelf slats in Step 4 After the slats are fittedyou can then attach everything to the other frame
GOOD TO KNOWIf you donrsquot yet own a pockethole jig you can substitute with dowels biscuits or steel angle brackets to join the sections together
150mm
540mm
A
A
B
B
B
340mm
C
C
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
52
4 Attach the shelf slatsUsing the crossbeams [B] as the support mount the shelf slats using pocketholes
Again if you donrsquot have a pockethole jig you can mount the slats by driving screws through the front of the crossbeams and into the slats
With the slats in place you can now attach the other frame to complete this section
5 Fill the front and side panelsNext came time to fill in the side panelsThe side panel is made from (2) 20 x 150mm pieces and a 20 x 77mm in the centre
Measure the opening and cut the pieces to fit
I used wood glue and wire nails hammered in at an angle on the inside to hold the panels in place leaving the outer view neat and clean The boards are flush with the inside frame edges
I also glued up all the seams on the inside
Repeat this for both side panels as well as the back panel
On the front panel a centre piece of plywood is fitted sothat the bottlecap design can be added
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
53
6 Add top trimThe top trim is built out of 20 x 77mm pine that is 1cm larger all the way around the exterior of the frame to give it a nice lip The corners are mitred glued and secured with panel pins
Place the cooler box upside down on top of the trim piece - making sure the box is centred over the frame Mark around the edge This will give you the tightest edge between your cooler and the top of the frame
Clamp and then cut with a jigsaw to carefully trim out the interior edge I went very slow around the corners and then sanded all the edges for a nice smooth finish
Once you have finished the trim you can fityour cooler into place
7 Make the lidI measured and built a simple frame with the 20 x 50mm pine - glued and nailed together
For the 20 x 77mm pine frame I measured and built this around the simple frame The outer frame has mitred corners for a neater finish
NOTE The plastic lid will not sit flush with thebottom edge of the wooden lid It needs to be bumped out a little so that when it closes it will fit tight to the cooler bottom - so besure to allow for this when framing the lid
The top of the lid is finish off withpieces of pine that are glued inside the frame
With all of that assembled you can mark for hinges
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
54
Finishing Off
You will find that you need some type ofstop so your lid doesnrsquot just snap off All that wood gives it a nice weight
I used two eye hooks and a length of chain attached to the side of the lid and top trim piece to keep my lid from opening too far
The drain on this cooler is roughly 12mm diameter and uses a short length of silicone tubing Have a jug of hot water handy to soften the tubing to make it easier to fit overthe opening and secure with a cable tie
With the cooler side of things assembled now I fixed my attention on the standI measured for the drain on the correct side Transferred my measurements to the side of the stand and used a spade bit to cut out a hole for a coupler
Finding the parts you need for the tap is tricky but hopefully the guys at Builders Warehouse will be able to guide you in the right directionYou need a coupler to fit intothe side of the frame and onto which you can screw a hose bib (tap)
It took some time to get the cooler shimmied into place I had to be careful with the silicone tube attached to the drain I folded it upward then slowly lowered the cooler to align the drain I used a screwdriver to poke the hose and fit it through the coupler Once it was inplace I screwed my brass hose bib into place and Voila I had a working drain
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
55
http
www
bird
sand
soap
com
2013
06co
oler-s
tand-
diy-tu
torial
-fathe
rs-da
yhtm
l
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
56
More great projects for you to make and take homeBeginners amp Advanced Workshops
Basic Electrical and Plumbing WorkshopsBasic Welding | Career Workshops
Saturday amp Sunday mornings from 0900 to 1200
wwwDIY-DIVAScoza
Join the Fun
Join the Fun
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza
57
IMA
GE
SO
UR
CE
IN
MA
GIN
EC
OM
IF YOU ARE TACKLING ANY TYPE OF DECORATING HOME IMPROVEMENT OR DIY PROJECT - WE WANT TO KNOW IN FACT WE WANT TO SHARE YOUR PROJECT AND ENTER YOU INTO THE QUARTERLY DRAW FOR BOSCH SKILL AND DREMEL TOOL HAMPERS
ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IS USE YOUR BOSCH SKIL OR DREMEL TOOLS TO MAKE REPAIR OR INSTALL AND SEND US A FEW lsquoBEFORErsquo AND lsquoAFTERrsquo PICS THEN TELL US HOW YOU TACKLED THE PROJECT
SEND IMAGES AND DETAILS TO home-dzineiburstcoza